2006 accord sedan online reference owner's manual contents

2006 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................4 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................7 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 55 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 101 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 153What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 167 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 191 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 237 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 263 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 277 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 281 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Accord Value Package Audio System

Information Provided by:

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Accord Sedan. You may finddescriptions of equipment and features thatare not on your particular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur enfrançais, veuillez demander à votreconcessionnaire de commander lenuméro de pièce 33SDAC30 .

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０５／０６／０３　０９：２４：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０００１　


One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to thestate of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and willbe pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

０５／０６／０３　０９：２４：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０００２　


－

－

－－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２４：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０００３　


Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

GAUGES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

AUDIO SYSTEM

AIRBAGS

(P.64)

(P.11, 23)

(P.58)INDICATORS

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

SHIFT LEVER

(P.90)

(P.77)

(P.91)

(P.82)

(P.156)

(P.157)(P.99)

(P.170, 173)

(P.102)

(P.114)

０５／０６／０３　０９：２５：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０００７　


＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

5

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

MOONROOFSWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

HORNSTEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

CRUISE CONTROLS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.31)

HAZARDWARNING BUTTON

VSA OFF SWITCH

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

(P.71)

(P.69)

(P.141)

(P.94)

VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES

(P.183)(P.73)

(P.72, 108)

(P.145)

(P.71)

(P.68)

０５／０６／０３　０９：２５：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０００８　


－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 11

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 17.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 20..Seat Belt System Components . 20

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21........ 21

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22Additional Information About Your

.....................................Airbags . 23......Airbag System Components . 23

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 30..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

.............................Airbag Service . 32...Additional Safety Precautions . 33

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 34

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 34

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 35

The Passenger’s Front Airbag................Poses Serious Risks . 35

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 37

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 37

...Additional Safety Precautions . 37Protecting Infants and

.........................Small Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.........Protecting Small Children . 40.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41....................Installing a Child Seat . 42

...............................With LATCH . 43...................................With a Belt . 45

..............................With a Tether . 47...........Protecting Larger Children . 48

..................Using a Booster Seat . 49When Can a Larger Child Sit in

.........................................Front . 50...Additional Safety Precautions . 51

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52...................................Safety Labels . 53

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

０５／０６／０３　０９：２５：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１０　


－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until theycan use the belt properly without abooster (see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

16

5134

193

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

8

０５／０６／０３　０９：２５：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１１　


Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

(6)(7)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(9)(8)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners

０５／０６／０３　０９：２５：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１２　


Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:


10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０５／０６／０９　０９：１２：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１３　


CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact (seepage for more information on howyour side airbags work).

Your vehicle a

more information on how your side

lso has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page for

curtain airbags work).25

3028


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０５／０６／０３　０９：２６：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１４　


The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.


Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

12

０５／０６／０３　０９：２６：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１５　


－

CONTINUED

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

Sguidelines on how to properly

ee pages for important

protect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

See page for how doors, and page for how the door

to lock the

monitor indicator works.

Your vehicle has a doormonitor indicator on the

instrument panel to indicate when aspecific door or the trunk is nottightly closed.

34 51

6077

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Adjust the Front Seats

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

０５／０６／０３　０９：２６：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１６　


If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel in and out (see page

). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

7385


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２６：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１７　


Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

87

85


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２６：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１８　


If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２６：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００１９　


After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

20

CONTINUED

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

RELEASEBUTTONS

０５／０６／０３　０９：２７：００　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２０　


When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.


Advice for Pregnant Women

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２７：０６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２１　


If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety Precautions

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０５／０６／０３　０９：２７：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２２　


Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

The seat belts use the samemonitoring system as the frontairbags. The system may not workproperly under these conditions:

Placing heavy items on the frontpassenger’s seat.

The front passenger is not sittingproperly.

The front passenger’s seat-back ispressed forward by a folded-downrear seat.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a small child isriding there, the indicator will notcome on and the beeper will notsound.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer if the indicator comes on orthe beeper sounds when there is nofront passenger or objects on thefront seat.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

20

０５／０６／０３　０９：２７：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２３　


CONTINUED

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

16

45


Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

０５／０６／０３　０９：２７：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２４　


The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

If the front seat belt tensioners everactivate, they must be replaced asthe belts will no longer retractproperly.

224

224

Honda Warranty Information

do not deploy


Seat Belt Maintenance

22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２７：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２５　


Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

25

28

30

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)(9)

(6)

(4)

(7)

(8)

(10)

(5)

(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger’s Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors

０５／０６／０３　０９：２７：４７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２６　


Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition is in ON (II).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the frontpassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight of an infant orsmall child is detected, thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

21

27

30

31

31

27


24

０５／０６／０３　０９：２７：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２７　


CONTINUED

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 31


How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

０５／０６／０３　０９：２８：０３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２８　


Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.


Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

26

０５／０６／０３　０９：２８：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００２９　


CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS Indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child, the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.


Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０５／０６／０３　０９：２８：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３０　


Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat. If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

If the weight sensors detect thatthere is no passenger in the frontseat, the airbag will be off. However,the Passenger Airbag Off indicatorwill not come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of thepassenger’s seat.

31

224


How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

28

０５／０６／０３　０９：２８：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３１　


There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if the heightand position sensors in the seatdetect a child has leaned into theside airbag’s deployment path, theairbag will shut off.

31


Side Airbag Cutoff System

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

０５／０６／０３　０９：２８：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３２　


In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works


30

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０５／０６／０３　０９：２８：４３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３３　


If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

This indicatoralerts you that thepassenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child on the front passenger’sseat. It does there is aproblem with the airbag.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then goout (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

59

CONTINUED

not mean


How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CanadaU.S.

CanadaU.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２８：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３４　


Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

However, if the indicator comes onwith no passenger in the front, orwith an adult in the seat, there maybe a problem with the advancedairbag system. Have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright and wear the seat beltproperly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.


If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Airbag Service

32

０５／０６／０３　０９：２８：５９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３５　


Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

０５／０６／０３　０９：２９：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３６　


－

－－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

475148

38

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

34

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２９：１１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３７　


－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system, whichcan automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), please follow theguidelines below.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

48

27

CONTINUED


InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

０５／０６／０３　０９：２９：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３８　


－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.


U.S. Models

Canadian Models

36

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

０５／０６／０３　０９：２９：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００３９　


－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.


During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

48

13

16

16


If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

０５／０６／０３　０９：２９：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４０　


－

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

78

83

Protecting Children General Guidelines, Protecting Infants and Small Children

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Child Seat Type

Protecting Infants

38

０５／０６／０３　０９：２９：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４１　


Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０５／０６／０３　０９：２９：５９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４２　


A child who is at least 1 year old, andwho fits within the child seat maker’sweight and height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

27

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Child Seat Placement

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Protecting Small Children

40

０５／０６／０３　０９：３０：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４３　


Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to

provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two second-row seats.

1.

2.

43

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３０：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４４　


After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

42

０５／０６／０３　０９：３０：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４５　


Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connection asshown above.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

3.


Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

Rigid typeLOWER ANCHOR MARKS

０５／０６／０３　０９：３０：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４６　


Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connection asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

4.

5.

6.

7.

87


44

TETHER STRAP HOOK

Flexible type ANCHOR

０５／０６／０３　０９：３０：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４７　


When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

０５／０６／０３　０９：３０：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４８　


After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.


46

０５／０６／０３　０９：３０：５１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００４９　


A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap through the head restraintlegs.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap through the headrestraint, and over the seat-back.

Follow steps 2 and 3 from theprevious column.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

43 45

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR ANCHORTETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

０５／０６／０３　０９：３１：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５０　


To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

48

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３１：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５１　


Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards (see page ) andthat you follow the booster seatmaker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far to the rear as possible,and be sure the child is wearing theseat belt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

4.

5.

3.

41


Using a Booster Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０５／０６／０３　０９：３１：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５２　


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a boosterseat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

48


Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

50

０５／０６／０３　０９：３１：２７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５３　


This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

０５／０６／０３　０９：３１：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５４　


Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

52

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３１：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５５　


These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully. If a label comes off orbecomes hard to read (except for theU.S. dashboard label which isremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

SUN VISOR

HOOD

DOORJAMBS

RADIATORCAP

DASHBOARD

０５／０６／０３　０９：３２：１１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５６　


This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56............................Instrument Panel . 57

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 58.............................................Gauges . 64

Odometer/Outside.............Temperature Display . 64

.....................................Odometer . 64...Outside Temperature Display . 64

...................................Trip Meter . 65...................Temperature Gauge . 65

..................................Fuel Gauge . 66..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 66

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 67

......................Wipers and Washers . 68...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 69

Automatic Lighting Off.........................................Feature . 70

................Daytime Running Lights . 70........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71

..............................Hazard Warning . 71.................Rear Window Defogger . 72

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 73...............................Keys and Locks . 74

........................Immobilizer System . 75................................Ignition Switch . 76

......................................Door Locks . 77..................Childproof Door Locks . 78

.......................Remote Transmitter . 78................................................Trunk . 82

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 83....................................Seat Heaters . 84

.................................................Seats . 85.............Power Seat Adjustment . 85

...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 85.............Front Seat Adjustments . 86

Driver’s Seat Manual Height..............................Adjustment . 86

Driver’s Seat Power Height..............................Adjustment . 87

..........................Head Restraints . 87.......................Folding Rear Seat . 88

.............................................Mirrors . 90....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 90

..............................Power Windows . 91Power Window Control

...............................Operations . 93.........................................Moonroof . 94

.................................Parking Brake . 95..........................................Sun Visor . 96

..................................Vanity Mirror . 96.................................Interior Lights . 97................................Ceiling Light . 97

...........Individual Interior Lights . 97

...........Interior Convenience Items . 98.......................Beverage Holders . 99

..........Accessory Power Sockets . 99...............Console Compartment . 99

....................Sunglasses Holder . 100..................................Glove Box . 100

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

０５／０６／０３　０９：３２：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５８　


Control Locations

56

MIRROR CONTROLS

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

CRUISE CONTROLS

MOONROOF SWITCH

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

INDICATORSGAUGES

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

SHIFT LEVER

(P.58)(P.64)

(P.94)

(P.90)

(P.77)

(P.82)

(P.156)

(P.145)

(P.71)

(P.114)

(P.102)

(P.109)

(P.170, 173)

(P.99)

(P.95)(P.157)

０５／０６／０３　０９：３２：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００５９　


The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATORLOW FUEL INDICATORMALFUNCTION

INDICATOR LAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

SEC URITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

DOOR AND TRUNKOPEN MONITOR

CRUISE CONTROL MAININDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

(P.58)

(P.58)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.58)

(P.62)

(P.60)

(P.63)

(P.59)

(P.63)

(P.62)

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR(P.63)

(P.58)

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

SEAT BELTREMINDER LIGHT

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.59)

LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR

(P.60)

(P.59)

(P.60)

(P.63)

(P.59)

(P.62)

０５／０６／０３　０９：３２：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６０　


The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. The engine can be severely damaged

if this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you and yourfront passenger have not fastenedyour seat belts.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .20

250

251

251

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

58

０５／０６／０３　０９：３２：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６１　


This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe ABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis on, your vehicle still has normalbraking ability but no anti-lockbrakes. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system, side curtainairbags, automatic seat belttensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you try to drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

30

31

180

1.

2.

253

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator Side Airbag Off

Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

CanadaU.S.

CanadaU.S.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３２：５３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６２　


The appropriate indicator comes onin this monitor if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly.

All the indicators in the monitorcome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your vehicle still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

2.

3.

1.

182

182

182

Door and Trunk Open MonitorVehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator


60

０５／０６／０３　１６：４３：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６３　


The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blink,or if they blink rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning button, both turn signalindicators blink. All turn signals onthe outside of the vehicle shouldflash.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 2.72 U.S. gal (10.3 ) offuel remaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

221 222

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０５／０６／０３　０９：３３：１１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６４　


This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

When the daytime running lights(DRL) are on, this indicator comeson with reduced brightness.

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the high beam headlight’s circuit.Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.

144

70

U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6

Security System Indicator ‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator


62

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０５／０６／０３　０９：３３：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６５　


This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willgo off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink and the enginewill not start (see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK(0) position.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control masterbutton (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

145

145

193

75

208

Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Canadian models only

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Cruise Control MainIndicator

Maintenance MinderIndicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

０５／０７／０１　１０：０５：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６６　


The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

The odometer and the outsidetemperature display use the samedisplay. To switch the displaybetween the odometer and theoutside temperature, press theSelect/Reset knob. When you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), whatyou last selected is displayed.

This display shows the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

EX-L and EX-V6

OdometerOdometer/Outside TemperatureDisplay

Outside Temperature Display

Gauges

64

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETERFUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TRIP METERODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR SELECT/RESET KNOB

U.S. model shown

０５／０６／０３　０９：３３：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６７　


± ±

－－－－－－－－

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer/outsidetemperature display by pressing theSelect/Reset knob repeatedly. Eachtrip meter works independently, soyou can keep track of two differentdistances.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise into theupper half of the gauge. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the Select/Resetknob for 10 seconds. The followingsequences appear, 1 second at atime: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the Select/Reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

248

Trip Meter Temperature Gauge

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

０５／０６／０３　０９：３３：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６８　


This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message willappear in the odometer/outsidetemperature display. As soon as it issafely possible, turn the engine offand check that the fuel cap isinstalled. If it is, loosen the cap andtighten it 1 click. Although you can

use the Select/Reset button to cycle the fuel cap warning off of the display, it will be displayed againeach time the engine is started. Itwill take several days of normaldriving for the vehicle to turn thewarning off.

If the vehicle on board diagnosticsystem continues to detect aproblem, the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) will illuminate. If theMIL does not go off, have yourdealer inspect the vehicle. For moreinformation, see page .

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

193

251

Fuel Gauge Check Fuel Cap Indicator(odometer/outside temperaturemessage)

Maintenance Minder Display

Gauges

66

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０５／０７／０１　１０：０５：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００６９　


＊

＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

MOONROOFSWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

HORNSTEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

CRUISE CONTROLS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.31)

HAZARDWARNING BUTTON

(P.71)

(P.69)

(P.141)

VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES

(P.94)

(P.181)(P.73)

(P.68)

(P.71)

(P.145)

(P.72, 108)

VSA OFF SWITCH

０５／０６／０３　０９：３４：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７０　


－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operation whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph(20 km/h).

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Except U.S. VP

Windshield Wiper

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

INT

Wipers and Washers

68

０５／０６／０３　０９：３４：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７１　


－

－

－

Turn signalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlight onHigh beamsFlash high beams

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever inthe proper direction and hold it. Thelever will return to center when yourelease it or complete a turn.

Turning the switchon the left lever to the positionturns on the parking lights, taillights,side marker lights, rear license platelights and lights-on indicator.Turning the switch to the

position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), youwill hear a reminder chime when youopen the driver’s door.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the lights-onindicator comes on as a reminder.

To turn on the highbeams, push the lever forward untilyou hear a click. The blue high beamindicator will come on (see page ).To turn off the high beams, pull thelever back. To flash the high beams,pull the lever farther back, and thenrelease it. The high beams remain onuntil the lever is released.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

62

Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal

Headlights

High Beams

Turn Signal, Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

０５／０６／０３　０９：３４：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７２　


This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, side marker lights,taillights, and rear license plate lightswithin 15 seconds of removing thekey from the ignition switch andclosing the driver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, thenopen and close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G

Automatic Lighting Off Feature, Daytime Running Lights

Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights

70

０５／０６／０３　０９：３４：２３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７３　


Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The Select/Reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver’s door.The brightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normal

brightness when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), theillumination turns off in about 10seconds.

To reduce glare at night, the instru-ment panel illumination dims whenyou turn the light switch to or

. Turning the Select/Resetknob fully to the right until you heara click will cancel the reduced bright-ness.

Hazard WarningInstrument Panel Brightness

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

U.S. model shownSELECT/RESET KNOB

０５／０６／０３　０９：３４：３１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７４　


The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove/in the button comes on toshow the defogger is on. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Rear Window Defogger

72

Manual A/C type shown Auto A/C type shown Vehicles with navigation system

０５／０６／０７　１７：１８：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７５　


Insert the key in the ignitionswitch, and unlock the steeringcolumn.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andthe indicator lights.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

2.

3.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３４：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７６　


Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the trunkrelease handle, rear seat trunkaccess, and glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

4.

5.

Keys and Locks

Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks

74

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITTER

０５／０６／０３　０９：３４：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７７　


If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go out. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

０５／０６／０３　０９：３４：５７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７８　


－－

－

－

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly. If the front wheelsare turned, the anti-theft lock maymake it difficult to turn the key.Firmly turn the steering wheel to theleft or to the right as you turn thekey.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), START (III).

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of thelights on the instrument panel comeon as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

LOCK (0) ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

76

０５／０６／０３　０９：３５：０３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００７９　


You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Each front door has a power doorlock master switch. Either switchlocks and unlocks all doors. Push thetop of the switch to lock all doors;push the bottom to unlock them.

Each door has a lock tab on it. Pushdown the tab to lock the door andpull it up to unlock. When you pushdown the tab on the driver’s door, allthe doors lock.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down, and close the door.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the key, turn itclockwise, and release it. Theremaining doors unlock when youturn the key a second time within afew seconds.

Door Locks

Ignition Switch, Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

top

bottom

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３５：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８０　


－

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both door lockswitches are disabled. They are notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior andinterior lights will flash. The doorsdo not lock if they are not fullyclosed or the key is in the ignitionswitch.

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks Remote Transmitter

LOCK

78

LEVER PANICBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

０５／０６／０３　０９：３５：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８１　


－

－

－

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about30 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.

When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system isactive.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk if the keyis in the ignition switch.

You cannot lock the doors with theremote transmitter if they are notfully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock.

After the doors automatically relock,the security system will be active.



Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK

PANIC

TRUNK

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

０５／０６／０３　０９：３５：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８２　


Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

1.

2.

Remote Transmitter

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter Battery

80

SCREW

０５／０６／０３　０９：３５：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８３　


＋

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

Install the parts in reverse order.

3.

4.

5.




Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

BATTERY

TAB

０５／０６／０３　０９：３５：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８４　


To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Give the person the valet key.

Pull up on the trunk release leverlocated to the left of the driver’sseat.

Lock the trunk release lever withthe master key. Also make surethe trunk pass-through cover islocked (see page ).

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

You can open the trunk in either ofthe following ways:

1.

2.

52

165

89

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

82

Pull

TRUNK RELEASE LEVERMASTERKEY

０５／０７／０１　１０：０５：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８５　


As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

For more information about childsafety, see page .38

Emergency Trunk Opener

Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０５／０６／０３　０９：３５：５３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８６　


After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag system, there isno heater in the passenger’s seat-back. The ignition switch must beON (II) to use the heaters.

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L and EX-V6

Seat Heaters

84

０５／０６／０３　０９：３５：５９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８７　


－

Raises or lowers theseat.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Moves the front of theseat up or down andthe rear of the seat upor down.

Moves the seatforward and backward.

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

The passenger’s seat has twoswitches. One moves the seatforward and backward, and the otherraises and lowers the seat.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and LX-V6

1413

U.S. EX-V6Canadian EX-V6

U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L and EX-V6

Power Seat Adjustment Driver’s Lumbar Support

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

０５／０６／０３　０９：３６：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８８　


To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat bottom,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

U.S. VP and SECanadian DX-G and SE

Front Seat Adjustments Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Seats

86

０５／０６／０３　０９：３６：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００８９　


The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The front and rear head restraintsadjust for height. You need bothhands to adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonand push the restraint down.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

U.S. EXCanadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6

15

Seats

Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment

Head Restraints

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

RELEASE BUTTON

０５／０６／０３　０９：３６：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９０　


The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the vehicle or inside the trunk.

To fold down the seat-back frominside the vehicle, insert the masterkey in the lock on the rear shelf.Turn the key clockwise, pull downthe top of the seat-back, then releasethe key.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe trunk panel.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Folding Rear Seat

Seats

88

MASTER KEY

GUIDEPull

０５／０６／０３　０９：３６：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９１　


Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .

The trunk pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

52

52

164


Seats

Carrying Cargo



Trunk Pass-through Cover

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

KEY CYLINDER

LID

KNOB

０５／０６／０３　０９：３６：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９２　


Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Push or pull the adjustment knobright, left, up, or down to move themirror.

When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are manuallyadjustable.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

3.

2.

4.

Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-GAdjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

90

TAB

ADJUSTMENT KNOB

０５／０６／０３　０９：３６：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９３　


－

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower any window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want thewindow to stop. Close the window bypulling the switch up and holding it.

To open the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down, then release it. To stopthe window from going all the waydown, pull back on the windowswitch briefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. To stop the windowfrom going all the way up, pushdown on the window switch briefly.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Except U.S. VP and LX, andCanadian DX-G

Power Mirror Heaters Power Windows

AUTO

Mirrors, Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３６：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９４　


－ If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

The passenger windows cannot beraised or lowered if the MAIN switchis OFF. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

1.

2.

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows

92

０５／０６／０３　０９：３７：０３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９５　


You can open all of the windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

To open:

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

1.

2.

3.1.

2.

Power Window ControlOperationsOpening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

Opening/Closing the Windows withthe Key

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

UNLOCK BUTTON

Open

Close

０５／０６／０３　０９：３７：１４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９６　


Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows start toopen. To stop the windows,release the key.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again.

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again.

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button

. To close the moonroof, pressand hold the upper button . Toopen the moonroof, press and holdthe lower button . Release thebutton when the moonroof gets tothe desired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.


Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof

94

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３７：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９７　


To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page ).

The moonroof has a key-off delayfunction. You can still open and closethe moonroof for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.The key-off delay function cancels assoon as you open either front door.You must then turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II) to operate themoonroof.

59

Parking Brake

Moonroof, Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

PARKING BRAKE LEVERIf you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３７：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９８　


To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror lights come onwhen you pull up the cover.

Except U.S. VP andCanadian DX-G

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

96

０５／０６／０３　０９：３７：３６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　００９９　


The ceiling lights have a three ortwo-position switch; ON (for three-position), Door Activated, and OFF.In the Door Activated (center or left)position, the lights come on whenyou:

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

Open any door.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.

The front ceiling light also containstwo spotlights. Push the spotlightlenses to turn them on and off.

Push on the spotlight lenses to turnthe light on and off.

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when you open that door.The light around the ignition switchonly comes on when you open thedriver’s door. After you close thedoor, the ignition switch light fadesout in about 30 seconds.

In the U.S. VP and the Canadian DX-G, the front doors do not havecourtesy lights.

U.S. LX, SE and LX-V6Canadian SE and SE-V6

U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L and EX-V6

Ceiling Light

Individual Interior Lights

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

COURTESY LIGHT

０５／０６／０３　０９：３７：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１００　


Interior Convenience Items

98

REAR DOOR POCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

GLOVE BOX

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS

CENTER POCKET,COIN POCKET andACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT andACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

FRONT DOOR POCKET andBEVERAGE HOLDER

０５／０６／０３　０９：３７：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０１　


Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you close the doors.Use only resealable containers in thedoor pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). None of the sockets willpower an automotive type cigarettelighter element. When more thanone socket is being used, thecombined power rating of theaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

The console compartment isequipped with a coin holder.



Beverage Holders

Accessory Power Sockets

Console Compartment


Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER

０５／０６／０３　０９：３７：５８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０２　


Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.


Sunglasses Holder Glove Box


100

GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０５／０６／０３　０９：３８：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０３　


The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 102...............Voice Control System . 104

..........Dual Temperature Control . 111..............Climate Control Sensors . 113

..........................Playing the Radio . 114...............Voice Control System . 116

.....................To Play the Radio . 116....................To Select a Station . 116

.................Adjusting the Sound . 119....................Radio Frequencies . 120

........................Radio Reception . 120..................................Playing a CD . 122

..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 124.............................To Play a CD . 124

...............To Stop Playing a CD . 127Removing CDs from the

.................................Changer . 127Operating the Optional CD

.................................Changer . 128.........CD Player Error Messages . 129

.....................Protecting your CDs . 130.................General Information . 130

..........................Protecting CDs . 130...............................Playing a Tape . 131

..........................To Play a Tape . 132............To Stop Playing a Tape . 132

............Tape Search Functions . 133Caring for the Tape and

.....................................Player . 134Playing the XM Satellite

......................................Radio . 135...............Satellite Digital Radio . 135

...To Play XM Satellite Radio . 136..................To Select a Channel . 136

..............Satellite Radio Signals . 138Receiving Satellite Radio

....................................Service . 139.............Steering Wheel Controls . 141

.................Radio Theft Protection . 142..........................Setting the Clock . 143

............................Security System . 144...............................Cruise Control . 145

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 148

U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6

U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6

Features

Features

101

TM

TM

０５／０６／０３　０９：３８：１１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０４　


Vents, Heating, and A/C

102

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MAX A/C BUTTONREAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL(DRIVER’S SIDE)

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL(PASSENGER’S SIDE)

MODEBUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

FAN SPEEDINDICATOR

AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON

MODE BUTTONS


REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation SystemCanadian EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System

０５／０６／０３　０９：３８：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０５　



Features

103

AUTO BUTTON

MODE ICONS

A/C BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING ICONS

FAN CONTROL ICONS

DUAL BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROLBUTTONS (PASSENGER’S SIDE)


WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROLBUTTONS (DRIVER’S SIDE)

OFF BUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation SystemCanadian EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System

０５／０６／０３　０９：３８：２２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０６　


▲ ▼

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See theNavi section in your Quick StartGuide for an overview of this system,and the Navigation System manualfor complete details.

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

You can manually select the fanspeed by pressing the fan controlbuttons. The fan speed isrepresented by vertical bars in thedisplay.

You can manually select the fanspeed by pressing the A/C buttonnext to the display and then,pressing the fan control icons.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings byselecting the DUAL button.

Push the DUAL button. When theindicator in the button is on, turn thedials to adjust the temperature.

Press the DUAL button. Theindicator in the button will come on.The driver and passenger can eachselect the temperature controlbuttons ( or ) to thedesired setting.

When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, both sides adjust to thedriver’s side temperature.

Only on models equipped withNavigation System

EX-L and EX-V6 without NavigationSystem

Except EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem

EX-L and EX-V6


EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System

EX-L and EX-V6




Voice Control System

Fan Control

Temperature Control

104

０５／０６／０３　０９：３８：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０７　


When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Press the A/C button to turn theair conditioning on or off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe air conditioning is on.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. The displayshows ‘‘A/C ON’’ when the airconditioning is on. The displayshows ‘‘A/C OFF’’ when the airconditioning is off.

The display shows ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’after you press the A/C button. Thedisplay shows ‘‘A/C ON’’ after youtouch ‘‘ON’’ to turn the airconditioning on. The display shows‘‘A/C OFF’’ after you touch ‘‘OFF’’ toturn the air conditioning off.

When the A/C is off, the airflowtemperature does not fall below theoutside air temperature. When youset the airflow temperature lowerthan the outside air temperature,make sure the A/C is on.

72

EX-L and EX-V6Except EX-L and EX-V6


EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Recirculation Button


Features

105

０５／０６／０３　０９：３８：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０８　


Use the mode control buttons oricons to select the vents the air flowsfrom. Some air flows from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. In these modes, the A/C stayson with the indicator off.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.

Press the A/C button to view thedisplay, then touch any of the modeicons on the display.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C, selects ,and switches to recirculation mode.Each indicator above the button is onwhen the MAX A/C is turned on.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.4.


EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem

U.S. VP, SE, EX and LX-V6Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6

Mode Control MAX A/C Button

Ventilation


106

０５／０６／０３　０９：３８：５７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１０９　


▲ ▼

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing theON button. The indicator in thebutton comes on when a fan speedis selected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial or button is set tomaximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Press the A/C button, the ManualOperation A/C screen will appear.Select the ON icon on the display.Select the desired temperatureand MODE selections. If theoutside air is humid, select theRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

Press the A/C button, the manualoperation of A/C screen willappear.Select the desired mode and fanspeed icons on the display.Adjust for warmth with thetemperature buttons ( or ).

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select the MAX A/C mode.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects andswitches to Recirculation mode.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming through thesystem.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.3.

1.2.

3.

65

If the interior is very warm,

Except EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation

System


EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation SystemExcept EX-L and EX-V6

Using the Heater Using the A/C


Features

107

０５／０６／０３　０９：３９：０８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１０　


Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

When you switch to , fromor mode, the A/C

stays on whether the indicator is onor off. This helps prevent thewindows from rapidly fogging upwhen the air is suddenly routed awayfrom the windshield. If you want toturn the A/C off, press and releasethe A/C button until the indicator inthe button comes on and then goesoff.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas previously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

Turn the fan on.If the A/C is off, turn it on (ifequipped).Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial or buttons to your preference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.2.

3.4.

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost


108

０５／０６／０３　０９：３９：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１１　


▲▼

Without Navigation System:

With Navigation System:For Vehicles with Navigation System

EX-L and EX-V6 Set thedesired temperature by turningthe Temperature Control dial. Youwill see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

Press the AUTO button.

Set thedesired temperature by pressingthe to raise the temperature or

to lower the temperature. Theselected temperature will show inthe upper display.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator does not come on ifit was previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.

2.3.


Automatic Climate ControlTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Features

109

０５／０６／０３　０９：３９：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１２　


－

－

－

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

When the Climate Control System isturned OFF, the temperature in theupper display will also turn off.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

If you press OFF, the climate controlsystem shuts off.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the automatic climatecontrol system when it is in AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled.

Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.

If you press the A/C button next tothe display, the manual selectionswill show in the display. Making anymanual selection causes theindicator in the AUTO button to turnoff.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air to raise or lower theinterior temperature to thetemperature you selected.

If you set the temperature to itslowest limit, (Lo) or its highest limit,(Hi) the system runs at full coolingor heating only. It does not regulatethe interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

Whenthe indicator in the Dual button is on,the driver’s side and passenger’s sidetemperature can be controlledindependently (see page ).111

With Navigation SystemDual Temperature Control


Except EX and EX-V6



To Turn Everything OffManual Operation

110

０５／０６／０３　０９：３９：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１３　


Without Navigation System

With Navigation System

EX-L and EX-V6

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol dials, one for the driver, andone for the front passenger.

Your vehicle has four temperaturecontrol buttons, two for the driver,and two for the passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials or buttonswhen the green indicator in theDUAL button is lit.

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the upperdisplay. For vehicles with navigationsystem, when the indicator in theDUAL button is off, you can adjustboth sides to the same temperatureby adjusting the driver’s sidetemperature control dial or buttons.

CONTINUED

Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Dials/Buttons

Features

111

DUAL BUTTON

Without Navigation System

DUAL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

With Navigation System

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

０５／０６／０３　０９：３９：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１４　


▲ ▼

▲ ▼

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then turn the driver’s control dial orpress the or buttons on thedriver’s side. To set the passenger’sside to a different value than thedriver’s, turn the passenger’s controldial or press the or buttons onthe passenger’s side. You can adjustthe passenger’s side withoutpressing the DUAL button first.

When you set the temperature to itslower or upper limit, it is displayed as

or .

Dual Temperature Control

112

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

０５／０６／０３　０９：３９：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１５　


The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

If your vehicle has a climate controlsystem

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

Climate Control Sensors

Features

113

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

０５／０６／０３　０９：３９：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１６　


Playing the Radio

114

SOUND BUTTON

SEEK BAR

TUNE BAR

SEEK BAR

SOUND BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

A.SELBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN BUTTON AM/FMBUTTON

A.SELBUTTON

TUNE BAR

PRESET BARS SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR PRESET BARS

EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation SystemU.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6Canadian DX-G, SE and SE-V6

０５／０６／０３　０９：４０：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１７　


Playing the Radio

Features

115

SEEK BAR

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

UPPERDISPLAY

PRESETICONS

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOSELECTICON

SOUND ICONSCANICON


０５／０６／０３　０９：４０：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１８　


－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset bars oricons.

Use the TUNE bar orknob to tune the radio to a desiredfrequency. Press the side of thebar or turn the knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, and the

side or turn the knob to the leftto tune to a lower frequency.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of thebar, then release it.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the PWR/VOL knob or theFM/AM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the PWR/VOL knob.

Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton will also turn on the system.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the FM/AMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

XM satellite radio information isavailable on page .

The audio system for your vehiclecan also be operated using the voicecontrol system. See the Navi sectionin your Quick Start Guide for anoverview of this system, and thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

135

For Vehicles with Navigation System

Only on models equipped withNavigation System

Playing the Radio

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

To Play the RadioVoice Control System

116

０５／０７／０１　１０：０５：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１１９　


－－－ Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe left or right side of the bar oricon and hold it until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Each preset bar or iconcan store one frequency on AM, andtwo frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbar or icon.

Push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto view the preset icons.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about five seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for five seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Playing the Radio

PresetSCAN

Features

117

０５／０６／０３　０９：４０：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２０　


－

－ If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsor icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find stations, thenstore them in the preset bars oricons as described previously.

press the A.SEL button or Auto Select icon. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Press the A. SEL button or touch theAuto Select icon. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It stores the frequencies of six AM,and twelve FM stations in the presetbars (1 6) or icons. You will see a‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a presetbar or icon if Auto Select cannot finda strong station for every preset baror icon.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

To turn off Auto Select,

Playing the Radio

AUTO SELECT

118

０５／０６／０３　０９：４０：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２１　


－

－

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOLUME knobor touch the icon to adjust thesetting to your liking. When the levelreaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’in the display.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode. On vehicleswith navigation system, touch theRETURN icon to go back to theaudio screen.

Press the SOUND button or icon, orpress the TUNE knob repeatedly todisplay the Bass (BAS), Treble(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader(FAD) settings. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theSOUND icon or press the TUNEknob.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio/CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then touchthe SOUND icon in the display.

Touch the arrows next to the BAS orTRE icons. The adjustment showsyou the current setting.

Touch the left or right bars on thesound grid. Balance is equalizedwhen the vertical lines are centeredon the grid.

Touch the front or rear bars on thesound grid. The fader is equalizedwhen the horizontal lines arecentered on the grid.

For Vehicles without Navigation System



Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Playing the Radio

Features

119

０５／０６／０３　０９：４０：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２２　


The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Playing the Radio

120

０５／０６／０３　０９：４０：４６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２３　


Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Playing the Radio

Features

121

０５／０６／０３　０９：４０：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２４　


Playing a CD

122

PWR/VOL KNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

EJECT BUTTON

CD SLOT

CD BUTTON RPT BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

CD SLOT

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIPBAR

SEEK/SKIPBAR

TRACKRPTICON

RANDOMICON

DISCRPTICON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

CD LOADINDICATOR

RDMBUTTON

CDBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

SCAN/RPT BUTTON

RDMBUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATORLOADBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

CD SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

CHANGEDISCBUTTON

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

PRESETBAR

PRESET BAR


Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System

Canadian EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System

０５／０６／０３　０９：４１：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２５　


Playing a CD

Features

123

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

CD LOADINDICATOR

CD BUTTON

SEEK BAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

LOADBUTTON

CD SLOT

CD LOAD INDICATOR

RANDOMICON

EJECTBUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

RDMBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

CD SLOT

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

CHANGEDISCBUTTON

TRACKRPTICON

DISC RPTICON

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System

０５／０６／０３　０９：４１：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２６　


To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II) position.

You operate the CD player/CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To select the CDplayer/CD changer, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Withthe in-dash CD changer, the disc andtrack numbers are displayed. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the CD/AUX XMbutton.

To play the tape when a CD isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player. The cassette player isoptional on all U.S. models.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.

Insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way to play it. When the systemreaches the end of the disc, it willreturn to the beginning and play thedisc again.

For Vehicles without in-dash CDchanger

For Vehicles with Satellite RadioTo Play a CD

Playing a CD, CD Changer

124

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４１：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２７　


－－

＋

▲▼

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay.The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and the redlight starts blinking.

When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thescreen again, insert the next CD inthe slot.Repeat steps 1 through 3 until allsix positions are loaded. If you arenot loading all six positions, thesystem begins playing the last CDloaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing. Selectthe empty position (the disc numberindicator is not highlighted) andpress the appropriate preset bar ortouch a disc icon. The current CDstops playing and starts the loadingsequence. The CD just loaded willplay.

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.The numbers of the disc and trackplaying are shown in the display. Onvehicles with navigation system,these numbers also appear in theupper display.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate side of a preset bar(1 6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC )to select the previous disc or Preset6 (DISC ) to select the next disc insequence. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theappropriate disc icon or press theor side of the CH/DISC bar. Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will try toload the CD in the next available slot.

Insert the disc into the CD slotwhen the green CD load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CDload indicator turns red and blinksas the CD is loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

For Vehicles with in-dash CD Changer For Vehicles with in-dash CD Changer


Features

125

０５／０６／０３　０９：４１：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２８　


－

－－

－

－

－

－

For Vehicles without Navigation System EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation SystemPress to play thetracks in random order. You will seeRDM in the display. Press the RDMbutton again to return to normal play.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on theselected disc in the order they arerecorded. To activate it, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display, and you willget a 10 second sampling of eachtrack on the selected CD. Press theSCAN button again to get out of scanmode.

To use the controls, press theAUDIO DISPLAY button, the controlicons will appear on the screen.

Press the icon orSCAN button, to get a 10 secondsampling of each track on thecurrent CD. Press the icon or buttonagain to turn it off.

Touch to get a 10second sampling of the first song ofeach disc in the CD changer. Touchthe icon again to turn it off.

Touch tocontinuously play the same song onthe CD. Press the icon again to stopthe function.

Push the toplay the next track on the disc. Pushthe once to replay the track inplay; press it twice to replay theprevious track. To move rapidlywithin a track, press and hold the

or button.

Press to continuouslyreplay a track. You will see RPT inthe display. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.

RANDOM

SCAN TRACK SCAN

DISC SCAN

TRACK RPT

SEEK/SKIP

REPEAT


126

０５／０６／０３　０９：４１：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１２９　


－

－

－

Touch the icon tocontinuously replay the current CD.Touch again to turn it off.

Touch the icon toplay the current CD in random order.Touch again to stop.

Selects an icon andplays the disc.

If a tape is in the optional tape player,press the AUX button to switch tothe tape while a CD is playing. Pressthe CD button again to switch backto the CD player.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, the CD will stay in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, the CD will begin playingwhere it left off.

Press the AM/FM or XM/CDbutton to switch to the radio orsatellite radio while a CD is playing.Press the CD button again to playthe CD.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset bar or icon. Whenthat CD begins playing, press theeject button. Continue pressing theEJECT button to remove all the discsfrom the changer.

To remove the disc currently playing,press the EJECT button. When adisc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 15 seconds, the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc willreload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.

For Vehicles with CD Player orChanger

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6U.S. EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6

DISC RPT

TRACK RDM

CH DISC

To Stop Playing a CD

Removing CDs from the Changer


Features

127

０５／０６／０３　０９：４１：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３０　


－＋

Load the desired CDs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use Preset 5 (DISC

), for a previous disc; or Preset 6(DISC ), to select the next disc insequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available CD to load andplay.

On LX model, if there are no CDs inthe changer, the display will flash,and you will have to select anothermode.

An optional six or eight disc CDchanger is available for your vehiclefrom your dealer.This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDplayer/changer or the radio.

U.S. VP and LXCanadian DX-G and SE

Operating the Optional CDChanger


128

０５／０６／０３　０９：４１：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３１　


If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

Cause SolutionError Message

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDChangerHigh Temperature

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.Insert CDs.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Player Error Messages

Features

129

０５／０６／０３　０９：４１：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３２　


When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

130

０５／０６／０３　０９：４２：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３３　


Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)

Features

131

PWR/VOL KNOB

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

CD/AUXBUTTON

RPTBUTTON

RPT INDICATOR

PRESET BARS

PROG ICON NR ICONRPT ICON

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIPBAR

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation System

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK BAR

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

UPPERDISPLAY

CH/DISCBAR

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

RPT INDICATOR

CD/SAT RADIOBUTTON

SEEKBAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

RPT INDICATOR

RPTBUTTON

PRESET BARS

US. VP, LX, SE, EX and LX-V6

０５／０６／０３　０９：４２：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３４　


▲

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Makesure the open side of the tape isfacing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of the tape isplaying. The indicates the sideyou inserted upward in now playing.If you want to play the other side,press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)side of the preset bar or press theAUDIO DISPLAY button and touchthe PROG icon. When the playerreaches the end of the tape, it willautomatically reverse direction andplay the other side.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will light in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing thePreset 4 (NR) side of the preset baror touching the NR icon. Dolbyremains off until you press thepreset bar or the icon again.

Dolby noise reductionmanufactured under license fromDolby laboratories licensingCorporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and thedouble-D symbol are trademarksof the Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To remove the tape, press theEJECT button on the cassette player.If you want to turn the player off,press the PWR/VOL knob or turnoff the ignition. The tape will remainin the drive.When you turn the system back on,the tape player will be in pause mode.Press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)side of the preset bar or touch thePROG icon on vehicles withnavigation system to resume play.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/AUX XM button. To change back tothe tape player, push the CD/AUXbutton or CD/AUX XM button.

Optional on all U.S. modelsTo Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape


132

０５／０６／０３　０９：４２：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３５　


－

▲

▼

－

－▲

▼

－

To rewind the tape,push the Preset 1 (REW) side of thepreset bar or the upper side ( ) ofthe CH DISC bar. You will see REWin the display. To fast forward thetape, push the Preset 2 (FF) side ofthe preset bar. You will see FF dis-played. Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3side of the bars or the lower side( ) of the CH DISC bar to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

Press the side to findthe beginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

To rewind the tapepush the upper side ( ) of the CHDISC bar. To fast forward the tape,push the lower side ( ) of the CHDISC bar. Press either side of thePROG icon in the audio display totake the system out of rewind or fastforward.

Press the RPT buttonor icon to continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button or icon again.

The SKIP and REPEATfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

If you see the error message‘‘ ’’ on the display, press thetape eject button to remove the tapefrom the unit. Make sure the tape isnot damaged. If the tape will noteject or the error message stays onafter the tape ejects, take yourvehicle to your dealer.


For Vehicles with Navigation SystemTape Search FunctionsFF/REW

SKIP

FF/REW

REPEAT


Features

133

NOTE:

０５／０６／０３　０９：４２：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３６　


If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

Caring for the Tape and Player


134

０５／０６／０３　０９：４２：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３７　


Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States except Hawaii, Alaska,and Canada.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Satellite radio is available in U.S.models only.

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6Satellite Digital Radio

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Features

135

DISPBUTTON

SAT RADIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

TUNEKNOB

TUNEBARSEEK/

SKIP/BAR

CATEGORY/CHANNELMODE INDICATOR

CATEGORY/CHANNELMODE INDICATOR

MODE ICON

SCAN ICON

SEEK/SKIP/BAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

SAT RADIOBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

PRESETBARS

PRESETICONS

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6without Navigation System

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6with Navigation System

TM

TM

０５／０６／０３　０９：４２：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３８　


－－The ignition must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on:

Press the TUNE bar to changechannel selections. Press forhigher numbered channels and

for lower numbered channels.

Turn the TUNE knob to changechannels. Turn the knob right forhigher numbered channels and leftfor lower numbered channels.

Press and release this button tochange the display. The display willchange in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob or the CD/AUX XMbutton.

Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob, the CD/AUX XM, orAUDIO button.

Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjustthe volume.

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of three methods tofind channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY), and SCAN.

Vehicles without Navigation System

Vehicles without Navigation System


For Vehicles with Navigation System For Vehicles with Navigation SystemTo Play XM Satellite Radio TUNEDISP

To Select a Channel


136

TM

TM

０５／０６／０３　０９：４２：５１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１３９　


－－

－

CONTINUED

Theseek/skip function selects thevarious categories in XM, such asJazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.Push the to change thecategory forward. Push the tochange the category backward. Tosearch for channels within acategory, turn the TUNE knobclockwise or press the TUNE bar

.

The scan function samplesall channels for 5 seconds. Toactivate the function, push the SCANbutton. Push it again to get out of thesequence.

Each preset icon or buttoncan store one channel in XM1 andone in XM2.

Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired channel.Pick a preset icon or button andhold it until you hear a beep.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on XM1 and XM2.

Once your XM channels are preset,pressing the CH DISC button willselect your preset channels.

Push the CD/AUX XM button.(You will see XM1 or XM2.)

1.

2.

3.

4.



SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) SCAN

Preset

Features

137

TM

０５／０６／０３　０９：４２：５９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４０　


Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas. Satellite signalsare more likely to be blocked by tallbuildings and mountains the farthernorth you travel from the equator.


Satellite Radio Signals

138

Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstaclesto the south.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

TM

０５／０６／０３　０９：４３：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４１　


Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on an east/west road witha mountain on the south side ofthe road.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving in tunnels.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the CD/AUX XMbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

CONTINUED

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


Features

139

TM

０５／０６／０３　０９：４３：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４２　


While awaiting activation, make sureyour vehicle remains in an open areawith good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the displayand you will be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number.

Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’appears in the display. Your I.D. willappear in the display.

After you have registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSAT Radio mode while you awaitactivation. This should take about 30minutes.

www.xmradio.com


To get your XM Satellite radio IDnumber:

140

TM

０５／０６／０３　０９：４３：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４３　


▲ ▼

＋－

＋

－＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit twice to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

If you are playing a tape in theoptional tape player, press the top( ) of the CH button to advance tothe next selection. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousselection. The system senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM1, XM2, CD, or a tape.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

U.S. SE, EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6

Steering Wheel Controls

Features

141

MODE BUTTON

CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON

０５／０６／０３　０９：４３：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４４　


－

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your Owner’s Manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,press and release the TUNE knob tostore it.

If your vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, press and releasethe TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’appears on the display.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, a dealer canaccess your code with your radio’sserial number. To access the serialnumber, turn the radio on. It mustdisplay ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radiooff. Push the preset 1, preset 6, andpower buttons at the same time, thenquickly release.

You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbars (1 6) after the system beginsworking. Your original settings werelost when power was disconnected.

If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in yourcode, turn the TUNE knob left orright until the first digit is displayed.Press and release the TUNE knob tostore it. Enter the remaining three

digits the same way.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code usingthe preset bars or the TUNE knob.Because there are hundreds ofnumber combinations possible fromthe five digits, making the systemwork without knowing the exactcode is nearly impossible.

Except U.S. VP and LXExcept Canadian DX-G and SE

Radio Theft Protection

142

０５／０６／０３　０９：４３：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４５　


You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. Pressing and holdingthe SOUND button, then pressingthe R (Preset 6) side of the bar setsthe clock back to the previous hour.If the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets the clockforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

Refer to the Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual to set up the time.

Press and hold the SOUND buttonuntil you hear a beep. The displayedtime begins to blink. Press on the H(Preset 4) side of the bar until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minutes by pressing theM (Preset 5) side of the bar until thenumbers advance to the desired time.When you are finished, press theSOUND button again to set the time.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.



Setting the Clock

Features

143

DIGITAL CLOCK

SOUND BUTTON

PRESET BARS


０５／０６／０３　０９：４３：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４６　


The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemlight on the instrument panel startsblinking immediately to show youthe system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the trunk will cause it tosound. It also sounds if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door Monitor on theinstrument panel (see page ), tosee if the doors and trunk are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for two minutes,then the system resets. To reset analarming system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock eitherfront door with the key or theremote transmitter.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release leveror the emergency trunk opener.

60


Security System

144

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０５／０６／０３　０９：４３：４７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４７　


Push in the Cruise Control MasterButton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE MAIN light on theinstrument panel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL light onthe instrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

1.

2.

3.Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

145

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４３：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４８　


The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel thecruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will come back on.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the DECEL/SETbutton.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

146

０５／０６／０３　０９：４４：０３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１４９　


When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle will accelerateto the same cruising speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterButton turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the cruise control masterbutton.

Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

147

０５／０６／０３　０９：４４：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５０　


－

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety feature

that causes the motor to stop andreverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote 2 to 5 inches fromHomeLink. Make sure you are notblocking your view of the redindicator in HomeLink.

1.

2.

If equipped Training HomeLink

General Information


Before you begin

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

148

０５／０６／０３　０９：４４：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５１　


Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1

second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:Go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

150


Features

149

０５／０６／０３　０９：４４：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５２　


For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem


150

TRAINING BUTTON

０５／０６／０３　０９：４４：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５３　


You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

1.

2.

148




Erasing Codes

Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance


Features

151

０５／０６／０３　０９：４４：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５４　


Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 154.................Fuel Recommendation . 154

.........Service Station Procedures . 156....................................Refueling . 156

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 157

...................................Oil Check . 159.............Engine Coolant Check . 160

...............................Fuel Economy . 161........Improving Fuel Economy . 161

...Accessories and Modifications . 162................................Accessories . 162

...........Modifying Your Vehicle . 163.Additional Safety Precautions . 163

.............................Carrying Cargo . 164................................Load Limits . 165

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk.................or on a Roof Rack . 166

Carrying Items in the.....Passenger Compartment . 166

Before Driving

Before

Driving

153

０５／０６／０３　０９：４４：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５６　


Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

We recommend quality gasolinecontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

For vehicles with manual transmission

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

154

０５／０６／０３　０９：４５：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５７　


Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Before

Driving

155

０５／０６／０３　０９：４５：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５８　


Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.

To open the fuel fill door, pushdown on the lever located to theleft of the driver’s seat.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

3.

4.

1.

2.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Refueling

Service Station Procedure

156

FUEL FILL CAP

Push

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４５：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１５９　


To Open the Hood:Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,

may come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the odometer/outside temperature display.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1.2.

5.

6.

251

Opening and Closing the Hood


Before

Driving

157

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH

０５／０６／０７　１７：１８：５８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６０　

the malfunction indicator lamp


4-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe front of the hood near thecenter.

To Close the Hood:

Lift it up slightly to remove thesupport rod from the hole. Put thesupport rod back into its holding clip.Lower the hood to about a foot (30cm) above the fender, then let itdrop. Make sure it is securelylatched.

Lower it to about a foot (30 cm)above the fender, then press downfirmly with your hands. Make sure itis securely latched.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

3.


158

SUPPORT ROD

6-cylinder models4-cylinder models

０５／０６／０３　０９：４５：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６１　


Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

1.

2.

3.

4.

204

Oil Check

Adding Oil


Before

Driving

159

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK(orange handle)

DIPSTICK(orange loop)

０５／０７／０１　１０：０６：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６２　


Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

209

198

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


160

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models

MIN

MAX

MAX RESERVE TANK

6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models

０５／０７／０１　１０：０６：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６３　


Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceminder. See

(see page).198

For example,

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

161

０５／０７／０１　１０：０６：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６４　


Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic

accessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability (see next pagefor additional information).

257

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

162

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４６：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６５　


Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withaftermarket components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

If a side airbagor a side curtain airbag inflates, acup holder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

This could prevent theairbag from inflating properly.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over orreplace the outside edge of a frontseat-back.

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

163

０５／０６／０３　０９：４６：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６６　


Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Door and seat-back pockets

Trunk, including the back seatswhen folded down

Center pocket

Console compartment

Roof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

164

CENTER POCKET

GLOVE BOX

DOOR POCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS

０５／０６／０３　０９：４６：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６７　


－ ×The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (395 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.

Steps for determining correct loadlimit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.[The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.]

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 pounds or 395 kilograms.

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity instep 4.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.For example, if the maximum loadis 850 lbs and there will be five 150lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.

(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

1.

2.

5.

6.

3.

4.

184

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

Before

Driving

165

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４６：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６８　


Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all passengers andaccessories must not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). Both are on a labelon the driver’s doorjamb.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the proper operation of theseats, or the advanced frontairbags.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

52

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

166

０５／０６／０３　０９：４６：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１６９　


This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the tractioncontrol system, and facts you need ifyou are planning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 168.......................Starting the Engine . 169

...................Manual Transmission . 170.....Recommended Shift Points . 171

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 172.......................Reverse Lockout . 172

..............Automatic Transmission . 173Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 173.......................................Shifting . 173

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 175....................Shift Lock Release . 176

...........................................Parking . 178..............................Parking Tips . 178.............................Braking System . 179

...............Brake System Design . 179.............Brake Wear Indicators . 179

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 180Activating the Anti-lock

....................................Brakes . 180............................ABS Indicator . 180

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 182

.........VSA Activation Indicator . 182..............VSA System Indicator . 182

.........................VSA Off Switch . 183

...........................Towing a Trailer . 184

Driving

Driving

167

０５／０６／０３　０９：４６：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７０　


You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepages to ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepages and ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see pages to

).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

10.

58

16

85 87

90 91

73

66

Preparing to Drive

168

０５／０６／０３　０９：４６：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７１　


Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START (III) for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If theengine does not start right away,pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. Returnto step 5 if the engine does notstart.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

75

Starting the Engine

Driving

169

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：００　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７２　


The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse.

On vehicles with 6-speed manualtransmission, the lockout systemprevents you from shifting directly

from Fifth to Reverse instead ofSixth (see page ).

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Avoidskipping gears when shifting up ordown or serious transmissiondamage can occur. When you are notshifting, do not rest your foot on theclutch pedal. This can cause yourclutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Failure to make sure theengine speed will not go into thetachometer’s red zone in a lowergear can cause serious enginedamage.

172On all 4-cylinder models with 5-speedmanual transmissionOn all 6-cylinder models with 6-speedmanual transmission

Manual Transmission

170

5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７３　


Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)47 mph (75 km/h)52 mph (83 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

With 5-speed manual transmission

With 6-speed manual transmissionRecommended Shift Points

Manual Transmission

Driving

171

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７４　


If you are still unable to shift toReverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

The manual transmission haslockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from Fifth to Reverse instead ofSixth while the vehicle is moving. Ifyou cannot shift to Reverse when thevehicle is stopped:

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the Neutralgate, then shift to Reverse.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toReverse.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to Reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone. The EngineSpeed Limiter only limits enginespeed when the accelerator is used.Attempting to reduce engine speedby shifting into a lower gear from ahigh speed can seriously damage theengine.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

1.

2.

3.

4.

6-speed manual transmission onlyEngine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

172

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：２３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７５　


If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from any position, press therelease button on the bottom of theshift lever to move it. You cannotshift out of Park when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY position (I).

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

These indicators between the tacho-meter and speedometer show whichposition the shift lever is in.

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

3

3

3

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving

173

SHIFT LEVER

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７６　


－－

－

－

－

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to Reverse. To shiftfrom Reverse to Neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift.

This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle and apply the parking brake.Press on the brake pedal when youare moving the shift lever fromNeutral to another gear.

This positionmechanically locks the transmission.Use Park whenever you are turningoff or starting the engine. To shiftout of Park, you must press on thebrake pedal and have your foot offthe accelerator pedal. Press therelease button on the bottom of theshift lever to move it.

176

3

3

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R) Drive (D )

Drive (D)

Neutral (N)

Park (P) 3


174

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７７　


－－This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on thebottom of the shift lever. Thisposition locks the transmission infirst gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

3

Second (2) Engine Speed LimiterFirst (1)


Driving

175

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７８　


Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or finger nailfile to remove the cover. Carefullypry off the edge of the cover.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.This allows you to move the shift

lever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Set the parking brake.1.

2.

3.

4.Shift Lock Release


176

COVER

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：５１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１７９　


Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

5.

6.


Driving

177

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

０５／０６／０３　０９：４７：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８０　


Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.


Parking Tips

Parking

178

０５／０６／０３　０９：４８：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８１　


Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, builds up heat,increases wear and reduces theireffectiveness. It also keeps yourbrake lights on all the time,confusing drivers behind you.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

In all models, the front disc brakeshave audible brake wear indicators.In all models except the U.S. VP, U.S.LX and Canadian DX-G, the rear discbrakes have audible brake wearindicators.

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System Design

Braking System

Driving

179

０５／０６／０３　０９：４８：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８２　


The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

this defeats the purpose of the ABS.Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal as you steer away fromthe hazard. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

You should never pump the brake pedal;

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

180

０５／０６／０３　０９：４８：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８３　


Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

It only helps with the

steering control during braking.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down, and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

253

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Important Safety Reminders

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

181

ABS INDICATOR

０５／０６／０３　０９：４８：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８４　


When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink. Theremay also be some unusual noisefrom the modulator.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some unusual noise from themodulator.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.The Vehicle Stability Assist system

helps to stabilize the vehicle duringcornering if the vehicle turns moreor less than desired. It also assistsyou in maintaining traction whileaccelerating on loose or slipperyroad surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine’s output, andby selectively applying the brakes.

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

182

VSA SYSTEMINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

０５／０６／０３　０９：４８：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８５　


Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the VSA system onand off.

231

238

VSA Off Switch

VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving

183

VSA OFF SWITCH

０５／０６／０３　０９：４８：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８６　


Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everthing in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too much tongueload reduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway.

Towing a Trailer

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

184

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４８：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８７　


To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of each axle mustnot exceed:

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

U.S. VP and LX:Canadian DX-G:

U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6 with automatictransmission:Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6 withautomatic transmission:

U.S. EX-V6 with manual transmission:Canadian EX-V6 with manualtransmission:


U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6:Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6:

U.S. EX, EX-L and SE:Canadian SE and EX-L:

U.S. EX-L and SE:Canadian SE and EX-L:

Towing a Trailer

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Driving

185

4,080 Ibs (1,850 kg)

4,145 Ibs (1,880 kg)

4,345 Ibs (1,970 kg)

4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg)

1,960 Ibs (890 kg)on the rear axle

2,225 Ibs (1,010 kg)on the front axle1,985 Ibs (900 kg)on the rear axle

2,360 Ibs (1,070 kg)on the front axle2,005 Ibs (910 kg)on the rear axle

2,195 Ibs (995 kg)on the front axle

０５／０６／０３　０９：４８：５３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８８　


Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.Towing can require a variety of

equipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow. To ensure the bestquality, we recommend that youpurchase Honda equipmentwhenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale. To locate the public scales inyour area, consult your local yellowpages or ask your dealer forassistance.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Towing a Trailer

Hitches

Safety Chains

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads

186

０５／０６／０３　０９：４９：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１８９　


Many states and provinces requirespecial outside mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, andregulations. Check with your localtrailer sales or rental agency for therequirements in your area, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.

Towing a Trailer

Additional Towing EquipmentTrailer LightsTrailer Brakes

Driving

187

０５／０６／０３　０９：４９：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９０　


When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use the D positionwhen towing a trailer on level roads.

184 186

227Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

188

０５／０６／０３　０９：４９：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９１　


Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

D is the proper shift lever positionto use when towing a trailer in hillyterrain.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left. Turnthe wheel to the right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

3

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Driving

189

０５／０６／０３　０９：４９：２７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９２　


This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages, amaintenance record, and instructionsfor simple maintenance tasks youmay want to take care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 192....................Maintenance Minder . 193....................Maintenance Record . 200

..............................Fluid Locations . 202........................Adding Engine Oil . 204

.......Recommended Engine Oil . 204..............................Synthetic Oil . 205

................Engine Oil Additives . 205.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 206

....................Windshield Washers . 208..............................Engine Coolant . 209

............Adding Engine Coolant . 209.......................Transmission Fluid . 211

Automatic.........................Transmission . 211

Manual.........................Transmission . 214

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 215................................Brake Fluid . 216...............................Clutch Fluid . 216

....................Power Steering Fluid . 216....................................Timing Belt . 217

.............................................Lights . 218.......................................Seat Belts . 224.....................................Floor Mats . 224

.................................Wiper Blades . 225

...............................................Tires . 227..................Inflation Guidelines . 227

Recommended Tire...............................Pressures . 228

..........................Tire Inspection . 229.....................Tire Maintenance . 229

.............................Tire Rotation . 230.........................Replacing Tires . 231

......................Wheels and Tires . 231..........................Winter Driving . 232

.............................Snow Tires . 232............................Tire Chains . 232

...................Checking the Battery . 234.............................Vehicle Storage . 235

281

Maintenance

Maintenance

191

０５／０７／０１　１０：０６：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９４　


All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.Wear eye protection andprotective clothing whenworking near the battery orwhen using compressed air.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate theengine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

Maintenance Safety


Carbon Monoxide poisonfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

192

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection,maintenance recommendations,and schedules in this owner’smanual.

０５／０６／０３　０９：４９：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９５　


－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items in theinformation display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and push and releasethe Select/Reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life displayappears (see page ).

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the engine oil lifedisplay according to this table:

64

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Indicator

Maintenance

193

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

SELECT/RESET KNOB

０５／０７／０１　１０：２９：４６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９６　


When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ messagealong with the same maintenanceitem code(s), every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

199

Maintenance Minder

194

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

０５／０７／０１　１０：２９：５３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９７　


－

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill be blinking. The display comeson every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Whenyou see this message, have theindicated maintenance performed byyour dealer as soon as possible.

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will see anegative mileage. It is displayedwhen you drive over 10 miles (forU.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadianmodels) after seeing the 0 percentmessage. Afterward, it shows yourdriving distance if you continue todrive. Immediately have theindicated maintenance done by yourdealer.

The maximum total mileage shownis ‘‘ 9999.’’

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the Select/Reset knob.

When the engine oil life display is 0percent or negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicatorremains on even if you change theinformation display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described in the nextpage.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

195

０５／０７／０１　１０：３０：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９８　


Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the odometer/trip meter display the next time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

When the vehicle needsmaintenance, maintenance codesappear on the information display.

For an explanation of themaintenance codes, see page .

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Press the Select/Reset knob untilthe engine oil life indicator isdisplayed.

Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 10 seconds. The engineoil life indicator and themaintenance item code(s) willblink.

3.

1.

2.

199

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeIndicator

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Maintenance Minder

196

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE

０５／０７／０１　１０：３０：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０１９９　


If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance items code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

4.

CONTINUED

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

197

０５／０７／０１　１０：３０：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２００　


－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

U.S. Vehicles:You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the odometer/trip meter display.

159

160

215

227

218

211

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance Minder

198

０５／０７／０１　１０：３０：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０１　


＊

＊

＃

＃

－－

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

199

Maintenance Main Items

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check parking brake adjustment

Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission fluid

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

(V6 engine only)

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

:

A

B

Symbol

1

2

3

4

5

Symbol1

1

If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months afterthe display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first columnon page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluidevery 3 years.

NOTE:

1 :

197

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry and fromdiesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speedsor trailer towing results in higher transmission andtransfer temperatures. This requires transmission andtransfer fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the Maintenance Minder. If youregularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, havethe transmission and transfer fluid changed at 60,000miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)(For A/T only:)

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under 20°F,

29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km(Canada).

Main

tenance

Min

der

０５／０７／０１　１０：３０：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０２　


Maintenance Record

200

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle.

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

０５／０７／０１　１０：３０：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０３　


Maintenance Record

Maintenance

201

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

０５／０７／０１　１０：３０：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０４　


4-cylinder Models

Fluid Locations

202

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

０５／０７／０１　１０：３１：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０５　


6-cylinder Models

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

203

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

CLUTCH FLUID(6-speed ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

０５／０７／０１　１０：３１：０８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０６　


Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Install the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

204

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

6-cylinder models4-cylinder models

０５／０７／０１　１０：３１：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０７　


Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

205

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

０５／０７／０１　１０：３１：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０８　


Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenanceminder (see page ). The oil andfilter collect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to theengine block. A stuck gasket couldcause an oil leak.

3.2.

1.

193

4.

Changing the Oil and Filter

206

WASHER

4-cylinder models

WASHER

6-cylinder models

OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLT

０５／０７／０１　１０：３１：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２０９　


Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

(6-cylinder models)

(4-cylinder models)

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

9.

8.

7.

6.

5.

10.

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance

207

OIL FILTER

6-cylinder models

OIL FILTER

4-cylinder models

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０５／０７／０１　１０：３１：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１０　


Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).63

Canadian Models:

Windshield Washers

208

LEVEL GAUGE

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０５／０７／０１　１０：３２：００　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１１　


If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.Always use Honda Long-LifeAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

209

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANKRESERVE TANK4-cylinder models

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０５／０７／０１　１０：３２：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１２　


The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

4.1.

2.

3.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

210

6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP

4-cylinder models

０５／０７／０１　１０：３２：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１３　


4-cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid into the tube to bring it to theupper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). If it’snot available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

CONTINUED


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

211

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０５／０７／０１　１０：３２：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１４　


To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page

). Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Make sure the rubber cap fits inthe dipstick guide and the dipstickis down all the way.

1.

2.

6.

193

4.

3.

6-cylinder models

Transmission Fluid


212

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０５／０７／０１　１０：３２：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１５　


If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid into the tube to bring it to theupper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). If it’snot available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger.

5.

4-cylinder models

Transmission Fluid

5-speed Manual Transmission

Maintenance

213

FILLER BOLT

Correct level

０５／０７／０１　１０：３２：５８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１６　


The fluid level should be up to theedge of the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole. Reinstall the filler bolt, andtighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


).

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

Remove the check bolt and look fortransmission fluid coming out of thebolt hole. If a small amount of fluiddrips out of the bolt hole, reinstallthe check bolt.

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.

193

EX-V6

Transmission Fluid

6-speed Manual Transmission

214

CHECK BOLT

WASHER

DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

FILLER BOLT

０５／０７／０１　１０：３３：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１７　


Pour the fluid into the filler holeslowly and carefully so you do notspill. Clean up any spill immediately;it could damage components in theengine compartment.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


).

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

Replace the brake fluid according tothe maintenance minder (see page

).

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

193

193

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance

215

０５／０７／０１　１０：３３：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１８　


The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Manual transmission modelsBrake Fluid Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

216

MAX

MIN

MAX

MAX

UPPER LEVEL

4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL

０５／０７／０１　１０：３３：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２１９　


－－Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

The timing belt should be replacedaccording to the maintenanceminder (see page ).

Replace the timing belt every 60,000miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km(Canada) if you regularly drive yourvehicle in any of the followingconditions:

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).Frequently tow a trailer.

193

6-cylinder modelsTiming Belt

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

Maintenance

217

LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

6-cylinder models

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０５／０７／０１　１０：３３：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２０　


The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be performed by your dealeror other qualified mechanic.

Your vehicle has two bulbs on eachside, four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your vehicle uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Lights

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

218

NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs getvery hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause the bulbto overheat and shatter.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５２：５３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２１　


CONTINUED

Open the hood. To change a bulbon the passenger’s side, undo thetwo fasteners and remove the airintake cover.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

1. 3.2.

4.

Lights

High Beam Headlight

Maintenance

219

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models TAB

BULBAIR INTAKECOVER

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models

AIR INTAKECOVER

０５／０６／０３　０９：５３：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２２　


Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the air intake cover.Reinstall the two fasteners andsecure them by pushing on theheads until they lock.

6.

5. 3.

4.

5.

1.

2.7.

Lights

Low Beam Headlight

220

HOLDING CLIPS

TAB

BULB

6-cylinder models BULB

０５／０６／０３　０９：５３：１１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２３　


Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach one in place by pushing onthe center.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1. 3.

2.

4.

8.

7.

6.

9.

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Turn Signal and Parking LightBulb

Maintenance

221

HOLDING CLIPS

BULB

０５／０６／０３　０９：５３：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２４　


To remove the burned out bulb,push it in and turn itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.

Install the new bulb and turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

Test the new bulb to make sure itworks.

Set the lining back.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise,and pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push a new bulb straight into thesocket until it bottoms, andreinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Open the trunk.

Remove the holding clips from thelining by using a flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Test the new bulb to make sure itworks.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

2.

1.

4.

3.

5.

6.

Lights

Replacing Rear Turn Signal LightBulbs

222

HOLDING CLIPS

BULB

SOCKET

０５／０６／０３　０９：５３：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２５　


Open the trunk.

Remove the trim clips from theright or left corner of the trunk lidtrim by carefully prying themusing a small, flat-tip screwdriverwrapped with tape.

Carefully bend back the corner ofthe trunk lid trim to expose thebulbs.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise,and pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Install a new bulb into the socket,and reinstall the socket into thelight assembly.

Test the light.

Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.

Press the trim clips back into theirholes.

1. 3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

6-cylinder models

Lights

Replacing Back-up Light Bulbs

Maintenance

223

TRIM CLIPS BULB

SOCKET SOCKETBULB

０５／０６／０３　０９：５３：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２６　


Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you use aftermarket floor matsmake sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

Clean dirty seat belts with a softbrush and a mixture of mild soap andwarm water. Do not use bleach, dye,or cleaning solvents that can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts airdry before you use the vehicle.

If you remove the floor mats, makesure to re-anchor them when you putthem back in your vehicle.

The driver’s and right rear floormats that came with your vehiclehook over the floor mat anchors.This keeps the floor mats fromsliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals ormarking the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

Seat Belts Floor Mats

Seat Belts, Floor Mats

224

LOOP

０５／０６／０３　０９：５３：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２７　


Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

225

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５３：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２８　


Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

226

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

０５／０６／０３　０９：５４：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２２９　


Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced. Check the air pressures when the

tires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on the next page.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride harshly, are moreprone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

Maintenance

227

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５４：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３０　


＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles), you will see readings 4 to 6psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )higher than the cold readings. Thisis normal. Do not let air out to matchthe recommended cold air pressure.The tire will be underinflated.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .268

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

U.S. VP

Rear:

Front:

U.S. SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-LU.S. LX

U.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6

1 :2 :

3 :

4 :

1

2

3

4

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tires

228

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89HP205/60R16 91V

P205/65R15 92H30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

P215/50R17 93V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

０５／０６／０３　０９：５４：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３１　


Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance

229

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

０５／０６／０３　０９：５４：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３２　


To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed inthe odometer/outside temperaturedisplay. Move the tires to thepositions shown in the chart eachtime they are rotated. If youpurchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

U.S. SE, EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6All Canadian models

Tire Rotation

Tires

230

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheels weights f orbalancing.

０５／０６／０７　１７：１９：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３３　


Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.



Wheels

U.S. SE, EX and EX-L:Canadian SE and EX-L:

Tires

Replacing Tires and Wheels Wheels and Tires

Maintenance

231

15 x 6 1/2 JJ

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

17 x 6 1/2 JJ

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５４：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３４　


＋

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount snow chains on your tireswhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

TiresU.S. VP:

U.S. LX:

U.S. SE, EX and EX-L:Canadian DX-G, SE and EX-L:


269

271

Tires

Snow Tires

Tire ChainsWinter Driving

232

P195/65R15 89H

P205/65R15 92H

P205/60R16 91V

P215/50R17 93V

０５／０６／０３　０９：５５：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３５　


When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

Cable-type: SCC SZ 134

U.S. SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-L


U.S. VP and LX

Tires

Maintenance

233

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

０５／０７／０１　１０：３３：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３６　

The chains listed above areavailable at most retail parts and accessory stores that carry SCC Products.

The SCC SZ 134 chain is availablefrom your dealer as a GenuineHonda Accessory (part number08W40-SDA-SZ134).


－Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified mechanic.

Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

234

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

4-cylinder models

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

6-cylinder models

０５／０６／０３　０９：５５：１４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３７　


If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Vehicle Storage

Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

235

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５５：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３８　


Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(manual transmission) or Park(automatic transmission).

Vehicle Storage

236

０５／０６／０３　０９：５５：２７　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２３９　


This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 238....................Changing a Flat Tire . 239

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 243Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor Operates

............................Very Slowly . 243The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 244

................................Jump Starting . 245..............If the Engine Overheats . 248

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 250..........Charging System Indicator . 251

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 251.......................Readiness Codes . 252

...............Brake System Indicator . 253..................Closing the Moonroof . 254

......................Emergency Towing . 255..............................................Fuses . 257

..............................Fuse Locations . 260

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

237

０５／０６／０３　０９：５５：３１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４０　


Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the VSA system (seepages and ). Driving withthe compact spare tire mayactivate the VSA.

On models with manualtransmission, do not drive for along period with the compactspare tire mounted on a frontwheel; it will damage the limitedslip differential.

182 183


Compact Spare Tire

238

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０５／０６／０３　０９：５５：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４１　


CONTINUED

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

The tools are in the trunk. Openthe trunk and raise the trunk floorby lifting up on the back edge.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

239

TRUNK FLOOR

SPARE TIRE

JACK

TOOL KIT

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５５：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４２　


The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

6. 7.

8.

9.


240

JACK JACKING POINT

０５／０６／０３　０９：５５：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４３　


CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Place the flat tire on theground with the outside surface ofthe wheel facing up.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.

10. 12.

11.

If a wheel cover is equipped


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

241

WHEEL WRENCH

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUB

０５／０６／０３　０９：５６：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４４　


Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

15.13.

14.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.


242

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

０５／０６／０３　０９：５６：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４５　


Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound or series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged. You can hear the starter motor

operating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Check these things:21.

245CONTINUED

If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

243

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５６：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４６　


In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery connections (see page

). You can then try jumpstarting the vehicle from a boosterbattery (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified mechanic todetermine the problem (see

on page ).If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified mechanic to find theproblem. Seeon page .

255

234

245

169

75

257

255

If the Engine Won’t Start

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

Emergency TowingEmergency Towing

244

０５／０６／０３　０９：５６：２８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４７　


Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions. Open the hood, and check the

physical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

The numbers in the illustration showthe order to connect the jumpercable.

Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

245

BOOSTERBATTERY

4-cylinder models

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５６：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４８　


－

＋

＋

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

4.

3.

Jump Starting

246

4-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY

6-cylinder models

０５／０６／０３　０９：５６：４３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２４９　


If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

7.

6.

5.

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

247

6-cylinder models

０５／０６／０３　０９：５６：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５０　


If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all accessories, and turnon the hazard warning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

255Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

248

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０５／０６／０７　１７：１９：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５１　


Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

7.

6. 8.

9.

10.

11.

255Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

249

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５７：０３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５２　


Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action. If necessary, add oil to bring the

level back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

159

255

204

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

250

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０５／０７／０１　１０：３３：５８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５３　


Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, it means one of the engine’semission control systems may have aproblem. Even though you may feelno difference in your vehicle’sperformance, continued operationmay cause serious damage.

CONTINUED

Malfunction Indicator LampCharging System Indicator

Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

251

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

０５／０６／０３　０９：５７：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５４　


If the indicator remains on or thefuel cap was not loose or missing,have the vehicle checked by thedealer as soon as possible.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, these

conditions to set the codes again.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capor replace it. Tightening the cap willnot make the indicator turn off

days of normal driving.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).275

Readiness Codes

StateEmissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

252

If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties. This indicator may alsocome on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５７：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５５　

immediately; it can take several

codes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under various


However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthis indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your dealerimmediately.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, the brake fluid level isprobably low in the reservoir. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page

). If the fluid level is low, takethe vehicle to your dealer and havethe brake system inspected for leaksor worn brake pads.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

215

255Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

253

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

U.S. models shown

０５／０６／０３　０９：５７：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５６　


Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

If you need to close the moonroofmanually, it means the moonroofopening/closing function isdeveloping a problem. Have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

5.

6.

4.

3.

1.

2.

257


Closing the Moonroof

254

ROUND PLUG SOCKET

０５／０６／０３　０９：５７：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５７　


－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front) and lift themoff the ground. The other two tiresremain on the ground.

Turn off the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Start the engine.Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

CONTINUED

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way to trans-port your vehicle.

This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

255

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

０５／０６／０７　１７：２１：５１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５８　


Emergency Towing

256

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

０５／０６／０７　１７：２１：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２５９　


The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, pull it toward youand take it out of its hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is locatednear the back of the engine compart-ment on the driver’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check if the device works.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

1.

2.

261260

CONTINUED

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

257

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

TAB

０５／０６／０３　０９：５８：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６０　


Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned out, replace itwith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

3. 4.

5.

Fuses

258

BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN

０５／０６／０３　０９：５８：０８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６１　


If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits withthe fuse puller provided in the under-hood fuse box. Make sure you cando without that circuit temporarily(such as the accessory power socketor radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

6.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

259

FUSE PULLER

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０５／０６／０３　０９：５８：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６２　


＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－

＋

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

U.S. EX, EX-L LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6U.S. VP, LX, SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-LU.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6Except Canadian DX-G

1 :

2 :

3 :

4 :

1234567

10 A(30A)10 A15 A10 A10 A7.5 A

Left Headlight Low(Rear Defroster Coil)Left Headlight HiSmall LightRight Headlight HiRight Headlight LowBack Up

89

1011

1213

15 A20 A

20 A30 A7.5 A20 A

FI ECUCondenser fanNot UsedCooling FanCooling FanMG. ClutchHorn, Stop

14151617

18

19202122

23

40 A40 A15 A30 A30 A20 A40 A40 A40 A40 A

100 A

50 A50 A

Rear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardABS MotorVSA MotorABS F/SVSA MotorDriver’s Power SeatPassenger’s Power SeatHeater MotorBatteryNot Used

B IG1 MainPower Window Main

1

2

3

2

3

2

3

4

Fuse Locations

260

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

０５／０６／０３　０９：５８：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６３　


－

－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

U.S. modelsU.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6U.S. EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE, EX-L, SE-V6 and EX-V6

1 :2 :

3 :

12345678

(15 A)15 A

(10 A)15 A10 A7.5 A10 A20 A

Drive by WireIgnition CoilDay LightLaf HeaterRadioInterior LightBack-Up LightsDoor Lock

910111213

1415

15 A7.5 A30 A

(20 A)

(20 A)(20 A)

Front Accessory SocketsIG OPDSIG WiperNot UsedPassenger’s Power SeatReclineDriver’s Power Seat SlideHeated Seat

161718192021222324252627282930313233

(20 A)(20 A)15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

(20 A)

7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A

Driver’s Power Seat ReclinePassenger’s Power Seat SlideIG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGP (PGM-FI ECU)Left Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowRight Front Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedIG HACNot UsedACCHAC OP

2

2

2

2

2

3

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

261

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０５／０６／０３　０９：５８：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６４　


The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 264................................Specifications . 266

DOT Tire Quality Grading.....................(U. S. Vehicles) . 269

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 269.................................Treadwear . 269

......................................Traction . 269.............................Temperature . 270

.................................Tire Labeling . 271.......................Emissions Controls . 272.....................The Clean Air Act . 272

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 272

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 272

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 272

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 273....................PGM-FI System . 273

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 273

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 273

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 273

....................Replacement Parts . 273..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 274

..............State Emissions Testing . 275

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

263

０５／０６／０３　０９：５８：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６６　


The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on theCertification label.

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

Identif ication Numbers

264

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０５／０６／０３　０９：５８：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６７　


The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped onthe front of the engine block.

Identif ication Numbers

4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models

TechnicalInform

ation

265

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

ENGINENUMBER

０５／０６／０３　０９：５８：４６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６８　


－－－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

266

Dimensions

Air Conditioning

Weights

Capacities

Capacities

189.5 in (4,813 mm)71.7 in (1,820 mm)57.2 in (1,453 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)25 27 oz (700 750 g)16 18 oz (450 500 g)

ND-OIL8

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

107.9 in (2,740 mm)61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Refrigerant typeCharge quantity

Lubricant type

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant 1.35 US gal (5.1 )

1.32 US gal (5.0 )1.77 US gal (6.7 )

1.90 US gal (7.2 )1.88 US gal (7.1 )2.22 US gal (8.4 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )4.5 US qt (4.3 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )5.3 US qt (5.0 )2.0 US qt (1.9 )

2.2 US qt (2.1 )

3.1 US qt (2.9 )3.2 US qt (3.0 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )7.4 US qt (7.0 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission oil

Automatictransmissionfluid

Windshieldwasherreservoir

2.3 US qt (2.2 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )

6-cylinder modelsApprox.

FrontRear

2 :

3 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

Total

Change

Total

Change

Total

U.S.Canada

1 :

1

2

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

０５／０６／０３　０９：５９：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２６９　


＊

＊

＊

－－－

－－－－－－－－－

－－－

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

267

Lights Battery

Fuses

12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 24/2.2 CP

12 V 21 W

Headlights

Front turn signal/Front parking lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlightsSpotlights/Front ceiling lightsTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightVanity mirror lights

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

21 W3 CP8 W8 W8 W5 W2 CP1.1 W

Capacity 12 V12 V12 V

36 AH/5 HR38 AH/5 HR52 AH/5 HR

Interior

Under-hood

See page 261 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 260 or the fuse boxcover.

HighLow 4-cylinder

6-cylinder

U.S. LX, SE and LX-V6Canadian SE and SE-V6U.S. EX, EX-L and EX-V6Canadian EX-L and EX-V6Except U.S. VP and Canadian DX-G

1 :

2 :

3 :

1

2

3

０５／０６／０３　０９：５９：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７０　


－

＊＊＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

Specifications

268

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder, SOHC VTEC6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine

3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)

143.6 cu-in (2,354 cm )182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm )

9.7 : 110 : 1

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11IZFR6K-13SKJ20DR-M13

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°15’

Size

Pressure

P195/65R15 89H

T135/90D15

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P205/65R15 92H

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

P205/60R16 91V

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

P215/50R17 93V

FrontRearFrontRearFront

NGK:DENSO:NGK:DENSO:

4-cylinder models6-cylinder modelsOn some models

3 :4 :5 :

Front/Rear

SpareFront

Rear

Spare

U.S. VPU.S. LXU.S. SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-LU.S. LX-V6 and EX-V6Canadian SE-V6 and EX-V6

1 :2 :3 :

4 :

3

4

3

4

3

4

3, 4

3, 4

3, 5

3, 5

1

2

3

4

1, 3, 4

2

1, 3

2, 4

０５／０６／０３　０９：５９：３６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７１　


－

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TechnicalInform

ation

269

０５／０６／０３　０９：５９：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７２　


－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

270

０５／０６／０３　０９：５９：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７３　


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

P

R

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

205

60

91Max Press

Max Load

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Labeling

TechnicalInform

ation

271

P205/60R16 91V

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

０５／０６／０３　１０：００：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７４　


＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Emissions Controls

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

272

０５／０６／０３　１０：００：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７５　


The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are

designed and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Ignition Timing Control System

TechnicalInform

ation

273

０５／０６／０３　１０：００：２２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７６　


The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

274

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

０５／０６／０３　１０：００：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７７　


Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

TechnicalInform

ation

275

０５／０６／０３　１０：００：３６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７８　


Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

State Emissions Testing

276

０５／０６／０３　１０：００：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２７９　


....Customer Service Information . 278....................Warranty Coverages . 279

Reporting Safety Defects............................(U.S. Vehicle) . 280

.....................Authorized Manuals . 281

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

277

０５／０６／０３　１０：００：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８０　


Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

264

Customer Service Information

278

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

(787) 250-4318

０５／０６／０３　１０：００：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８１　


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2006 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2006 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

279

０５／０６／０３　１０：０１：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８２　


If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

280

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８３　

888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153);


－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００６

ＨＯＮ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

281

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61SDA08

61SDA09

61SDA08EL

61SDA30

31SDA630

31SDA730

31SDAM10

31SDDM10

31SDAQ30

HON-R

Price

Each

$75.00

$45.00

$50.00

$44.00

$35.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

Form Description

2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4

Service Manual Base Book

2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6

Service Manual Supplement

2003-2006 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003-2006 Honda 2/4 door

Body Repair Manual

2006 Honda Accord

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

2006 Honda Accord 4-door Owner’s Manual

2006 Honda Accord L4 Honda Service History

2006 Honda Accord V6 Honda Service History

2006 Honda Accord 4-door Quick Start Guide

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

０５／０６／０３　１０：０１：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８４　


－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

282

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

０５／０６／０３　１０：０１：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８５　


CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 58, 251............................Jump Starting . 245

..............................Maintenance . 234............................Specifications . 267

..............................Before Driving . 153........................................Belts, Seat . 10

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 180

.............Break-in, New Linings . 154...........................................Fluid . 215

.........................................Parking . 99.........................System Indicator . 59

........................Wear Indicators . 179.............................Braking System . 179

........................Break-in, New Car . 154..Brightness Control, Instruments . 72

........................Brights, Headlights . 70Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 223..............................Brake Lights . 223

................Front Parking Lights . 221.................................Headlights . 218

............................Specifications . 267............Turn Signal Lights . 221, 222

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 218....................................Accessories . 162ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 76...............Accessory Power Socket . 99

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 205...................................Airbag (SRS) . 11

..........Airbag System Components . 23............................Air Conditioning . 105

.........................................Usage . 107.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 228

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 59, 180

...................................Operation . 180.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 78

........Audio System . 114, 122, 131, 135.............Automatic Speed Control . 145..............Automatic Transmission . 173

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 266.......................................Shifting . 173

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173................Shift Lever Positions . 173

....................Shift Lock Release . 176

............................Capacities Chart . 266.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52

.............................Carrying Cargo . 164..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

...................................CD Changer . 128.......................................CD Player . 122

..........................CD Pocket, Center . 99

........................Certification Label . 264............................................Chains . 232

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 239Changing Oil

........................................How to . 206......................................When to . 193

...Charging System Indicator . 58, 251............Checklist, Before Driving . 168

..................Childproof Door Locks . 78

Index

A B

C

IND

EX

I

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８６　


.......................................Child Seats . 34...........Lower Anchorage Points . 43..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47

..............Climate Control Sensors . 113.........................Clock, Setting the . 143

...................................Clutch Fluid . 215........................CO in the Exhaust . 274

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 169..............................Compact Spare . 238

...................Console Compartment . 99

.................Consumer Information . 278.............Controls, Instruments and . 55

Coolant........................................Adding . 209

....................................Checking . 160.........................Proper Solution . 209

...................Temperature Gauge . 65Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 274............Cruise Control Operation . 145.............Customer Service Office . 278

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 70............Defects, Reporting Safety . 280

................Defogger, Rear Window . 72....................................Dimensions . 266

...............Dimming the Headlights . 69Dipstick

.Automatic Transmission . 211, 212..................................Engine Oil . 159

..........................Directional Signals . 69........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 179

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 207Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 77..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 269

Downshifting, Manual.............................Transmission . 170

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 167

....................................Economy . 161..........Dual Temperature Control . 111

..............................Economy, Fuel . 161............Emergencies on the Road . 237.............Battery, Jump Starting . 245

...........Brake System Indicator . 253................Changing a Flat Tire . 239

.....Charging System Indicator . 251..................Checking the Fuses . 257

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 250...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 251...Manually Closing Moonroof . 254

..................Overheated Engine . 248...........................Emergency Brake . 95

......................Emergency Flashers . 71......................Emergency Towing . 255.......................Emissions Controls . 272

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 65

Malfunction Indicator......................................Lamp . 251

.......................Oil Life Indicator . 193..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 250..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 204

...............................Overheating . 248............................Specifications . 266....................Speed Limiter . 172, 175

.......................................Starting . 169..........Engine Speed Limiter . 172, 175

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 272...............................Exhaust Fumes . 52

Index

DE

II

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８７　


CONTINUED

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 18

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 161.........................................Gasoline . 154...........................................Gauge . 66

................Octane Requirement . 154........................Tank, Filling the . 156

................Gas Station Procedures . 156Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 65...............................................Fuel . 66

...............................Speedometer . 64.................................Tachometer . 64

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 173

..............Manual Transmission . 170......................................Glove Box . 100

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 218..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 71

........................................Headlights . 69........................................Aiming . 218

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 70............Daytime Running Lights . 71............Low Beams, Turning on . 69

.........................Reminder Chime . 69........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 218

...................................Turning on . 69..............................Head Restraints . 87

.....................Heating and Cooling . 102.................................Heated Mirror . 91

HomeLink Universal

..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 157...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 215

...................................Fan, Interior . 104.........................................Features . 101

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 156Filter

...............................................Oil . 206Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 214Manual Transmission

................................Shifting the . 170.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 71

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 239Fluids

.Automatic Transmission . 211, 212..........................................Brake . 215.........................................Clutch . 215

..............Manual Transmission . 214..........................Power Steering . 216

..................Windshield Washer . 208...........................Folding Rear Seat . 88..........................Four-way Flashers . 71

.................................................Fuel . 154...............................Cap Message . 66

......................Fill Door and Cap . 156...........................................Gauge . 66

................Octane Requirement . 154........................Tank, Filling the . 156

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 257

Index

F

G

H

IND

EX

III

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８８　

Transceiver................................. 148


－

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 264Ignition

..............................................Keys . 74...........................................Switch . 76

............Timing Control System . 273........................Immobilizer System . 75

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 58

...............................Infant Restraint . 38......................................Infant Seats . 38

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 227

...................................Inside Mirror . 90.............................Inspection, Tire . 229

....................Installing a Child Seat . 42..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47

.............................Using LATCH . 43............................Instrument Panel . 57

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 240

.......................................Jack, Tire . 239................................Jump Starting . 245

..................................................Keys . 74

.......................Label, Certification . 264.................Lane Change, Signaling . 69

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 20Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 218.......................................Indicator . 57

.......................................Parking . 221..................................Turn Signal . 61

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 76Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 76............................Fuel Fill Door . 156

..................................Glove Box . 100....................Lockout Prevention . 78

.................................Power Door . 77...........................................Trunk . 82

........................Low Coolant Level . 160

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 170...........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 58

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 266.........................................Luggage . 164

..................................Maintenance . 191.............................Minder . 193 199

Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 198

........................................Record . 200..........................................Safety . 192

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 251...................Manual Transmission . 170

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 214...............................Meters, Gauges . 64

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 90.................................Modifications . 163

.........................................Moonroof . 94......................Closing Manually . 254

.....................................Operation . 94

Index

I

J

K

L

M

IV

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：３１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２８９　


CONTINUED

...................Neutral Gear Position . 174..................New Vehicle Break-in . 154

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 171...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 264

..............Panel Brightness Control . 71........................Park Gear Position . 174

.................................Parking Brake . 95

.................................Parking Lights . 69..Parking Over Things that Burn . 276

..................................Parking Tips . 178.............................PGM-FI System . 273

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 34

Protecting Infants and Small.......................................Children . 38

...........Protecting Larger Children . 48.....................Using Booster Seat . 49

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 154.........................................Odometer . 64

Odometer/Outside Temperature........................................Display . 64

Oil........................Change, How to . 206......................Change, When to . 193......................Checking Engine . 159..............Pressure Indicator . 58, 250

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 205

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 76..............................Outside Mirrors . 90

.....................Outside Temperature . 64....................Overheating, Engine . 248

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 198

...................Radiator Overheating . 248Radio/CD Sound

...............System . 118, 119, 122, 123Rear Lights, Bulb

......................Replacement . 222, 223

..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 88............................Rear View Mirror . 90

.................Rear Window Defogger . 72...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 86

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 171.............................Reminder Lights . 58

.......................Remote Transmitter . 78Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 206..........................................Fuses . 257

................................Light Bulbs . 218

................................Timing Belt . 217...........................................Tires . 231

.............................Wiper Blades . 225Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 22.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 209

...............................Restraint, Child . 34..........Reverse Gear Position . 172, 174

................................Rotation, Tire . 230

Index

N

O

P

R

IND

EX

V

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２９０　


－

－

......................................Safety Belts . 10............Safety Defects, Reporting . 280

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 53

...............................Safety Messages . ii................................Satellite Radio . 135

.........................................Seat Belts . 10...............Additional Information . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20................................Maintenance . 22

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 20, 58

...................System Components . 20...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20................Seats, Adjusting the . 85 87

............................Security System . 144.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41

...............................Serial Number . 264....................Service Minder . 193 199

.............................Service Manual . 281...........Service Station Procedure . 156

..........................Setting the Clock . 143.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173

........................Shift Lock Release . 176..............................Side Airbags . 11, 28

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 29

................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 30How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 30...............................Signaling Turns . 69

.....................................Snow Tires . 232.......Sound System . 114, 122, 131, 135

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 238

............................Specifications . 268....................Specifications Charts . 266

................................Speed Control . 145

........................Speed Limiter . 172, 175...................................Speedometer . 64

..........SRS, Additional Information . 23...Additional Safety Precautions . 33

.............................Airbag Service . 32

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

How Your SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 30

How Your Front Airbags.......................................Works . 25

How Your Side Airbags.......................................Works . 28

........................SRS Components . 23.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 59

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 76.......................Starting the Engine . 169

................With a Dead Battery . 245........Steam Coming from Engine . 248

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 73

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 76Stereo Sound

...............System . 114, 122, 131, 135..........................................Sun Visor . 96

........................Sunglasses Holder . 100Supplemental Restraint

................................System . 11, 23

......................................Servicing . 32.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 59

...................System Components . 23

Index

S

VI

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２９１　


CONTINUED

..................................Synthetic Oil . 205

.....................................Tachometer . 64.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 237

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 269.....Emissions Control Systems . 272

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 273

.......................Temperature Gauge . 65..............Tether Anchorage Points . 47

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 273..........................Time, Setting the . 143

....................................Timing Belt . 217

....................................Tire Chains . 232.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 239

.................................Tire Labeling . 271...............................................Tires . 227

..............................Air Pressure . 228.........................Checking Wear . 229..........................Compact Spare . 238

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 269......................................Inflation . 227

..................................Inspection . 228

...................................Replacing . 231......................................Rotating . 230

...........................................Snow . 232............................Specifications . 268

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 239Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 184................Emergency Wrecker . 255

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

......................Automatic . 211, 212Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 214..........Fluid Selection . 211, 213, 214

..............Identification Number . 265.............Shifting the Automatic . 173

..................Shifting the Manual . 170.....................................Treadwear . 269.......................................Trip Meter . 65

................................................Trunk . 82....................Emergency Opener . 83

.................................Opening the . 82...................Open Monitor Light . 60

....................................Turn Signals . 69

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 237

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 269........................Unleaded Gasoline . 154

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 207

..................................Vanity Mirror . 96.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 165

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 266....Vehicle Identification Number . 264

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 182

...VSA Activation Indicator . 60, 182.........................VSA Off Switch . 183

........VSA System Indicator . 60, 182.............................Vehicle Storage . 235

.................................................VIN . 264..................................Viscosity, Oil . 205

...........Voice Control System . 104, 116

Index

T

U

V

IND

EX

VII

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：５１　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２９２　


.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 53

....................Warranty Coverages . 279Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 208.....................................Operation . 68

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 73............Alignment and Balance . 229

..........................Compact Spare . 238......................................Wrench . 239

Windows..................Operating the Power . 91

...........................Rear, Defogger . 72Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 68

.......................................Washers . 68Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 225.....................................Operation . 68

....................................Worn Tires . 229.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 255

Index

W

VIII

０５／０７／０１　１０：３４：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２９３　


Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Manual Transmission Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

2.3 US qt (2.2 )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

U.S. VP, SE, EX and EX-LCanadian DX-G, SE and EX-L

U.S. LX

Front:

Rear:


204

211 212

214

216

215

5-speed manual transmission:

6-speed manual transmission:

０５／０７／０１　１０：３５：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６３０　０２９７　


2006 accord sedan online reference owner's manual contents

Documents